‫‪PowerEn.

ir‬‬

‫ﻣﺪارات ﻓﺮﻣﺎن در ﺑﺮق ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻨﺪس ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪي‬
‫آذر ﻣﺎه ‪1384‬‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬

‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‪٢..................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۱-۱‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ‪۳....................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۲-۱‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪٣.............................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪- ۳- ۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪٤ ...............................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۴-۱‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ :‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ‪٦...................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۱-۲‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪٨..........................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۲-۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ‪٨..................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۳-۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ‪١٠ .......................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۴-۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪١٠ ...........................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۵-۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺗﻬﺎ‪١١......................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۶-۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪١١..........................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۷-۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ ‪١٣ ...............................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۸-۲‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬

‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪١٦ .......................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۱-۳‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪١٦ ......................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۲-۳‬‬
‫‪-۱-۲-۳‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻫﺮﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪١٧ .............................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۲-۲-۳‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ ‪١٧ ...................................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۳-۲-۳‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﯼ‪١٨ .......................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۴-۲-۳‬ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ‪٢١ ....................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ‪٢٣ ........................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۳-۳‬‬
‫‪-۱-۳-۳‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻞ ‪٢٣ ....................................................................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪-۲-۳-۳‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ‪ SMF‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺐ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‪٢٤ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۳-۳-۳‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ MMS‬ﻭ ‪٢٥ .....................................................................................................................MRS‬‬
‫‪-۴-۳-۳‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪٢٦ ............................................................................................... Furnas 11‬‬
‫‪-۵-۳-۳‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪٢٦ ........................................................................................................ 3RU10‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬

‫‪-۶-۳-۳‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪٢٨ ..............................................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪-۷-۳-۳‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪٢٨ ....................................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪٢٩ .................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۴-۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ‪٣٠ ....................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۵-۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎ ‪٣١ ..............................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۶-۳‬‬
‫‪-۱-۶-۳‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭ ‪٣١ ...................................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۲-۶-۳‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ‪٣٢ .........................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۳-۶-۳‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭘﻨﻴﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪٣٢ ...........................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۴-۶-۳‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ‪٣٢ .................................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ‪٣٣ ..................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۷-۳‬‬
‫‪-۱-۷-۳‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﯽ ‪٣٤ ....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۲-۷-۳‬ﺭﻧﺞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ‪٣٥ .........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۳-۷-۳‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ‪٣٥ .......................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪٣٦ ............................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۸-۳‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪:‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ ‪٣٩ .................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۱-۴‬‬

‫ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ ‪٤٠ .............................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۲-۴‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪٤١ ...............................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۳-۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‪٤١ ...........................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۴-۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪٤٣ ...................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۵-۴‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ‪٤٣ .....................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۶-۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪٤٤ ..............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۷-۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪٤٦ .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۸-۴‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪٤٩ ......................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۹-۴‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪٥٢ ...................................................................................................................................................‬‬

‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪٥٣ ................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۱-۵‬‬
‫‪-۲-۵‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺳﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪٥٤ ......................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۳-۵‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ‪٥٥ ..........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۴-۵‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪٥٦ ..........................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۵-۵‬‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪٥٦ ........................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۶-۵‬‬
‫ﮐﻼﺱ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ‪٥٧ ................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۷-۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ‪٥٧ .......................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۸-۵‬‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ ‪٥٨ .....................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۹-۵‬‬
‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪٦٠ ............................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۱۰-۵‬‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﻤﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪٦١ ....................................................................................................................... ۴۸‬‬ ‫‪-۱۱-۵‬‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪٦١ .....................................................................................................................................SIRIUS 3RU11‬‬ ‫‪-۱۲-۵‬‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ‪٦٢ .................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۱۳-۵‬‬
‫‪ -۱-۱۳-۵‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪٦٢ ........................................................... FURNAS ESP 100‬‬
‫‪-٢-١٣-٥‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪٦٣ ............................................................................... Siemens 3RB10‬‬
‫‪-۳-۱۳-۵‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪٦٣ ............................................................................... Siemens 3RB12‬‬
‫‪ -۴-۵‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ‪٦٤ ....................................................................................................................................... ProFI Bus DP‬‬
‫‪-۵-۵‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪٦٥ ................................................................................................................ 3UF5 SiMOCODE – DP‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ‪٦٧ ..................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۱-۶‬‬

‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪٧٠ .........................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۲-۶‬‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪٧٢ ..................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۳-۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ‪٧٣ ..................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۴-۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪٧٤ .......................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۵-۶‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪٧٤ ........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۶-۶‬‬
‫‪-۱-۶-۶‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪٧٥ .................................................................................................................................................... NEMA‬‬
‫‪-۲-۶-۶‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪٧٦ ...........................................................................................................................................................IEC‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪ -۷-۶‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ‪٧٧ ...................................................................................................................................... DP‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪٧٨ ........................................................................................ FURNAS INNOVA PLUS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ‪٧٨ ........................................................................................................................................................... ESP100‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪٧٩ .......................................................................................................................................... SiRIUS 3R‬‬
‫‪-۸-۶‬‬
‫‪-۹-۶‬‬
‫‪-۱۰-۶‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪٨١ ............................................................................................................................................................ 3TF‬‬ ‫‪-۱۱-۶‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ‪٨٢ ..............................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۱۲-۶‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪:‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﯽ‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﯽ ‪٨٥ ...........................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۱-۷‬‬

‫ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﯽ‪٨٦ ........................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۲-۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪٨٨ .......................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۳-۷‬‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ ‪٩٠ ..............................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۴-۷‬‬
‫‪-۱-۴-۷‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪٩٠ .................................................................................................... SiRIUS 3RH11‬‬
‫‪-۲-۴-۷‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪٩١......................................................................................................... Plug in‬‬
‫‪-۳-۴-۷‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪٩١...............................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۱-۳-۴-۷‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ -‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪٩٢ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۲-۳-۴-۷‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ – ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪٩٣ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۳-۳-۴-۷‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪٩٤ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۴-۳-۴-۷‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ -‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪٩٥ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۵-۳-۴-۷‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ‪٩٥ .....................................................................................................‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﯼ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﯽ ‪٩٨ ....................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۱-۸‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪٩٩ ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۲-۸‬‬
‫‪-۱-۲-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﯼ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪٩٩ ............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۲-۲-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪١٠١ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۳-۲-۸‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﻩ ‪١٠٤ ................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ‪١٠٥................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۳-۸‬‬
‫‪-۱-۳-۸‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﯼ ‪ AC‬ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﯼ ﺁﻥ ‪Error! Bookmark not defined..........................‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪-۱-۱-۳-۸‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ‪١٠٦..........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۲-۱-۳-۸‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﺐ ‪١١٠ ..................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۳-۱-۳-۸‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﯼ ‪١١١ .............................................................................................................................. AC‬‬
‫‪-۴-۱-۳-۸‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﮑﻔﺎﺯ‪١١٣ ...........................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﻩ ﺁﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻓﻨﻮﻥ ﭘﺘﺮﻭﺷﻴﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬

‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﯼ ‪ AC‬ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ‪١١٤ .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۴-۸‬‬
‫‪-۱-۴-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ‪١١٤ ...............................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۲-۴-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪١١٦ ................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۱-۲-۴-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﯼ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺗﻮ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ‪١١٦ ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۲-۲-۴-۸‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪١١٧ .....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۳-۲-۴-۸‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪١١٨ ...........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۴-۲-۴-۸‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١١٨ ..................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۵-۲-۴-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ‪١١٩ ...............................................................‬‬
‫‪-۶-۲-۴-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ ‪١٢١ ...................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۷-۲-۴-۸‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ‪١٢٦ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ ‪١٢٧ ...................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۵-۸‬‬
‫‪-۱-۵-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪١٢٧ ...................................................................................................................... SiRIUS 3R‬‬
‫‪-۲-۵-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪١٢٨ ........................................................................................................... SIKO START‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﮑﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ‪١٣٠...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۶-۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ‪١٣١ ............................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۷-۸‬‬
‫‪-۱-۷-۸‬ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ‪١٣٢ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۲-۷-۸‬ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ‪١٣٣ ......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۳-۷-۸‬ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﮑﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ‪١٣٥ ..............................................................................................‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻧﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ !‪LOGO‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ‪١٣٩ ....................................................................................................................................................... LOGO‬‬ ‫‪-۱-۹‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪١٤٠ ......................................................................................................................................................................LOGO‬‬ ‫‪-۲-۹‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ‪١٤١ ..........................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۳-۹‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻫﻢ‪:‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ )ﺩﺭﻳﻞ( ‪١٤٤ ....................................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۱-۱-۱۰‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ‪١٤٤ .........................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۲-۱-۱۰‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰﻱ ‪١٤٥ .....................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۳-۱-۱۰‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ‪١٤٦ ......................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-۱-۱۰‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬

‫‪-۴-۱-۱۰‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ‪١٤٧ ......................................................................................................................................................‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ‪١٥٠................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۲-۱۰‬‬
‫‪-۱-۲-۱۰‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ ‪١٥٠........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ ‪١٥٠...............................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۳-۱۰‬‬
‫‪-۱-۳-۱۰‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ ‪١٥١ ..................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺯ ‪١٥٢ ....................................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۴-۱۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﭘﺮﺱ ‪١٥٧ ...............................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۵-۱۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﭽﻲ )ﮔﻴﻮﺗﻴﻦ( ‪١٥٨ .............................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۶-۱۰‬‬
‫‪-۱-۶-۱۰‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﭽﻲ ‪١٥٨ .............................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﻼﻭﻳﺰ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪١٥٩ ....................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪-۷-۱۰‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬

‫‪ -۱-۱‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﮐﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ )‪ ،(Jogging‬ﺗﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪( ۱‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۱‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪( ۲‬‬

‫‪-۳-۱‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺮﻭﺳﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪) .‬ﺷﮑﻞ ‪(۳‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪( ۳‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۴-۱‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ‪،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻋﻤﻴﻖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﺭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩﮐﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ دوم‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﻣﺪارات‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ‪،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‪،‬ﮐﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺗﻬﺎﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﺪﺍﻉ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻣﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ‬ ‫‪-۱-۲‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۴‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ )‪ Normally Open (NO‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ )‪Normally Close (NC‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۵‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ NO‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻧﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﮑﻪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﻻﻣﭗ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۴‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺮﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪،(۶‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ NO‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﭘﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۷‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ NC‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﮑﻪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۷‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪-۲-۲‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺯﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۸‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻟﻴﻤﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،١‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮ)‪ (Flow‬ﻭ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۸‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹‬ﻳﮏ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻃﺮﻑ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ NO‬ﻭﻳﮏ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪-۳-۲‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﻲ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﮑﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ NO‬ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ NC‬ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‬

‫‪1- Foot switch‬‬

‫‪2-Pushbuttons‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۰‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۰‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۱‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻃﺮﻑ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‪ NO‬ﻭﻳﮏ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‪ NO‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻻﻣﭗ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۲‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻻﻣﭗ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۱‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۲‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪-۴-۲‬‬

‫ﮐﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۳‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭ ‪ CR‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪ NC‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ NO‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۳‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۴‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ M‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪ M‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪ M‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ‪ M‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻨﺪﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۴‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﮐﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۵‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬
‫‪-۵-۲‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۵‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-۶-۲‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻳﮏ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻓﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪) .‬ﺷﮑﻞ ‪(۱۶‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۶‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫‪-۷-۲‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻼﺋﻤﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫)‪ (۱‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪1-Pilot light‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(۱‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪-۸-۲‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪FTS‬‬ ‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫‪CR‬‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬ ‫‪AC‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪FU‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪CT‬‬ ‫ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‬ ‫‪ALM‬‬
‫ﮊﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪GEN‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﭙﺮﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪AM‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫‪GRD‬‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪DC‬‬ ‫ﺁﺭﻣﻴﭽﺮ‬ ‫‪ARM‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ‬
‫‪HOA‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪DISC‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬ ‫‪AU‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ‬ ‫‪IC‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﭘﻞ‬ ‫‪DP‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪BAT‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻻﮎ‬ ‫‪INTLK‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﭘﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪DPDT‬‬ ‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﺮﻳﮏ‬ ‫‪BR‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ‬ ‫‪IOL‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﭘﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪DPST‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪CAP‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪JB‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ‬ ‫‪DT‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪CB‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﻤﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ‬ ‫‪LS‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪CKT‬‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ‬ ‫‪LT‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬ ‫‪FREQ‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫‪CONT‬‬
‫ﺗﮏ ﭘﻞ‬ ‫‪SP‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬ ‫‪POS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﮏ ﭘﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪SPDT‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪PRI‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪MTR‬‬
‫ﺗﮏ ﭘﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪SPST‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪PS‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪MN‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ‬ ‫‪SS‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪NEG‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬ ‫‪SSW‬‬ ‫ﻳﮑﺴﻮﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪REC‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺗﺮﺍﻝ‬ ‫‪NEUT‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ‬ ‫‪RES‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﮐﻠﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪NC‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪TB‬‬ ‫ﺭﺋﻮﺳﺘﺎ‬ ‫‪RH‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﭘﻦ‬ ‫‪NO‬‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪TD‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪OHM‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪THS‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ ‫‪SEC‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪OL‬‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪TR‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻮﻧﻮﺋﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪SOL‬‬ ‫ﺷﺴﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪PB‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‬ ‫‪UV‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪PH‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪XFR‬‬ ‫‪VFD‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ‪ NO‬ﻭ ‪ NC‬ﺩﺭﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ‪،‬ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻫﺮﻣﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۳‬ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﺴﺘﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ‬

‫‪ -۴‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ‬

‫‪ -۵‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﺳﻮﺋﻴﭽﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪-۱-۳‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﻭﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﻲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫• ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﭘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻪ ﭘﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﮐﺐ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪-۲-۳‬‬

‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﻲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫• ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻓﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫• ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻲ‪ :‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻫﺮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ ﻭﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻫﺮﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪-۱-۲-۳‬‬

‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻫﺮﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۷‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻫﺮﻣﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺎﻗﻮﻳﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻢ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺩﺭﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻭﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪،‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﺯﮐﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﺭﺩﻱ )‪ (NH‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۷‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ‬ ‫‪-۲-۲-۳‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﮐﻪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻠﻄﮏ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬ﻓﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻭﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۸‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۸‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۲-۳‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﻤﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۹‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻭﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﻭﻓﺮﻭﺭﻓﺘﮕﻴﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ‬
‫)ﭘﻼﺗﻴﻦ (ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻓﻨﺮﻱ ﻭﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﺴﺖ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۹‬‬

‫ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ‪ 22mm‬ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۰‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﮐﺰﻳﻤﻢ ‪۶‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻝ‪ 30mm‬ﺗﺎ ‪۱۶‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۰‬‬

‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۲۱‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ ۱‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ PL1‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ ۲‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ PL2‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ‪ PL1‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻳﺎ ‪ . PL2‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۱‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺨﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻮﭘﺮ ﻭﺧﻂ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺻﺤﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻫﺪﻑ)‪(Target‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻑ ‪X‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۲‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪ ۲‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ‪B‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪ PL2‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۲‬‬

‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۲۳‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ‪،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪ Off‬ﻳﺎﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ)‪ (Liquid Level‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﭘﻤﭗ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﻭﺩ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺷﮑﻞ‪( ۲۳‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۳‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۴-۲-۳‬ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ )ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ( ﻭﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻗﻄﻊ )ﺍﺳﺘﭗ( ﺩﺭﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺴﺘﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﭗ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﭗ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﭗ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﭗ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﺴﺘﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺭﭼﻲ ﺷﮑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ NO‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ .NC‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‪ 22mm‬ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۴‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﮐﺰﻳﻤﻢ‪ ۶‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ‪30mm‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﮐﺰﻳﻤﻢ‪ ۱۶‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۴‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٢٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﺴﺘﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۲۵‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ‪ NO‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۵‬‬
‫ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ NC‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۲۶‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۶‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٢٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ‪ NO‬ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ‪ NC‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻳﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ‪ NO‬ﻭ ‪ NC‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪-۳-۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ١ NEC‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۷‬ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﮏ ﭘﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻞ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۷‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۳-۳‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻞ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۸‬ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﮑﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ‬

‫‪1- National Electrical Code‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٢٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺗﮏ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ‬
‫)‪ (۲۹‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‬
‫‪ LVP‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻭﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۸‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۲۹‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۳-۳‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ‪ SMF‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺐ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ -‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻧﻴﺰﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻭ‪ 277VAC‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۳۰‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺐ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 230VAC‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٢٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۳۰‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۳-۳‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ MMS‬ﻭ ‪MRS‬‬

‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ MMS‬ﻭ ‪ MRS‬ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ SMF‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۳۱‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ AC‬ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺗﮑﻔﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ AC‬ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺗﺎ ‪ 10HP‬ﻭ ‪ 600VAC‬ﻭﺗﺎ‬
‫‪ 1-1/2HP‬ﻭ ‪ 230VDC‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۳۱‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٢٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۴-۳-۳‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪Furnas 11‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪ Furnas 11‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﻟﻴﺎﮊ ﺫﻭﺑﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻴﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻭ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﮐﺰﻳﻤﻢ ‪ 10HP‬ﻭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ‪ 460VAC‬ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 5HP‬ﺩﺭﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‪ 230VAC‬ﺗﮑﻔﺎﺯﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۳۲‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪ ۱۱‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۳۲‬‬
‫‪ -۵-۳-۳‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪3RU10‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﻬﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ‪ SiRIUS 3R‬ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﻤﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (۳‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(۳‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ 3RV101‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۳۳‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻤﭙﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 3RV102‬ﻭ ‪ 3RV103‬ﻭ ‪ 3RV104‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٢٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۳۳‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ‪ SiRIUS 3R‬ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﮐﻠﻤﭙﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﺷﺘﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ‬
‫)‪ (۳۴‬ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۳۴‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٢٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۶-۳-۳‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۳۵‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪ Furnas 58‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ AC‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﮐﻼﺱ‪ 58‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎ ‪ 10HP‬ﻭ ‪ 460VAC‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۳۵‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ -۷-۳-۳‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪ Furnas 53‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۳۶‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺗﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۳۶‬‬

‫‪1- Master Switch‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٢٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪-۴-۳‬‬

‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻﻣﭗ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﮐﻢ )‪۱/۵‬ﺗﺎ ‪۵‬ﻭﺍﺕ ( ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ،ON/OFF‬ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪ ،‬ﺁﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻧﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۳۷‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭﻳﺎﺳﺮﭘﻴﭻ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻃﻠﻖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ )ﺩﺭﺳﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪،‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪،‬ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﻲ(ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺍﺯ ‪۲۴‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ‪۲۲۰‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۳۷‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬ ‫‪-۵-۳‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ )ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﭗ( ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﺴﺘﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻭﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺨﭽﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺨﭽﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺨﭽﺎﻝ ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺨﭽﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻻﻣﭗ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻭﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﻟﻴﻤﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻟﻴﻤﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻴﻤﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻭﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۳۸‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۳۸‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٣١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪- ۶- ۳‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻭﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻕ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﭗ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫• ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ‬
‫• ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭘﻨﻴﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫• ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‬

‫‪ -۱-۶-۳‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﮐﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﺋﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪،‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۳۹‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۳۹‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٣٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۶-۳‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۴۰‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ‪R‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ‪ C‬ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺑﻴﺲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺰﻳﺴﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺰﻳﺴﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﻴﺘﺮ ﻭﮐﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﮐﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺰﻳﺴﺘﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﭗ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺰﻳﺴﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ R‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺩﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺰﻳﺴﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‪ IC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ IC555‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۴۰‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۶-۳‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭘﻨﻴﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﮐﭙﺴﻮﻝ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﻲ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﮏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﻲ‪،‬ﮐﭙﺴﻮﻝ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ ﻭﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۴-۶-۳‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻳﮑﻪ ﺳﺮﻣﺎ ﻭﮔﺮﻣﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ )ﺭﻟﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ (ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺸﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٣٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫‪- ۷- ۳‬‬

‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻮﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۴۱‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪،‬ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭﻳﺎﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺩﮐﺸﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻮﻕ ﻭ ﻳﺎﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺍﺳﺐ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۴۲‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ NC‬ﻳﺎ ‪ NO‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۴۱‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۴۲‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٣٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﻮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺷﮑﻞ‪( ۴۳‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۴۳‬‬
‫‪ -۱-۷-۳‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۴۳‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ‪ NC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﻧﮏ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۴۴‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۴۴‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٣٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۷-۳‬ﺭﻧﺞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬

‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﭘﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۴۵‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ FURNAS‬ﮐﻼﺱ ‪ 69ES‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﺞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ‪5‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 80PSI‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۴۵‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻳﺎ ‪ CUT- IN‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ 5PSI‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﮐﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ ‪ CUT OUT‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ 80PSI‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ FURNAS‬ﮐﻼﺱ ‪ 69ES‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻧﺞ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻠﻲ ‪ 15-25PSI‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ CUT- IN‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ 30PSI‬ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ‪ CUT OUT‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ 50PSI‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫‪ 20PSI‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 30‬ﻭ ‪ 50PSI‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۷-۳‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬

‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ CUT- IN‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﮔﺎﺯﻱ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻤﭙﻬﺎ ﻭ ﮐﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﮐﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۴۶‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ FURNAS‬ﮐﻼﺱ ‪ 69WR5‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ)‪ ( CUT OUT‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ 10PSI‬ﻭ ﻣﺎﮐﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ‪ CUT- IN‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 80PSI‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ‪ 30PSI‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ‪ 50PSI‬ﺑﺒﻨﺪﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٣٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۴۶‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫‪-۸-۳‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻱ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﻣﺪﺍﺭﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 5000‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۴۷‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۴۷‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۴۸‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ‪ 460VAC‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ‪24VAC‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ 24VAC‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٣٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۴۸‬‬

‫ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۵‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪ -۶‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪ -۷‬ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪ -۸‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٣٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٣٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺴﺘﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ‬ ‫‪-۱-۴‬‬

‫ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻧﺮﺩﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﮑﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻧﺎﺯﮎ ﻭﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺿﺨﻴﻢ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۴۹‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ‪،‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ‪ ١‬ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀﻭﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻧﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۰‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۱‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۴۹‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪1- Functional‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٤٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۰‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۱‬‬

‫ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ‬ ‫‪-۲-۴‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻧﻴﺰﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻣﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۲‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ L1‬ﻭﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۲‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٤١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪-۳-۴‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۳‬ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺿﺨﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻧﺎﺯﮎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۳‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪-۴-۴‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۵۴‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﮏ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮ )ﺑﺎﺭ (ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ )ﺟﺰﺀﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ (ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺑﺎ ‪ L1‬ﻭ ‪ L2‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ L1‬ﻭ ‪ L2‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‪ 120VAC‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ 120VAC‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ‪120‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ L1‬ﻭ ‪ L2‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪ L2‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۵‬ﻳﮏ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪ L2‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ OL‬ﺑﻪ ‪L2‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 120‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‪ M‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٤٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۶‬ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ L1‬ﻭ ‪ L2‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻫﻴﭻ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‪ ۱۲۰‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻧﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻞ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ L1‬ﻭ ‪ L2‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‪ ۱۲۰‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮﻫﺮ‬
‫ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۴‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۵‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۶‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٤٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫‪-۵-۴‬‬

‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ L1‬ﻭ ‪ L2‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۵۷‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻳﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻫﺮﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ ، L1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻭ ‪ L2‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۵۸‬ﺩﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ L1‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪ L2‬ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭﻱ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۷‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۸‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫‪- ۶- ۴‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﻲ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۵۹‬ﻭﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ )‪(۱‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ‪ ۱‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮ‪ ۱‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ‪ ۲‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ‪ ۲‬ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭﺧﻂ ‪ ۳‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ۱‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪ M‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ )‪ (۴‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٤٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۵۹‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪- ۷- ۴‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۶۰‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺴﺘﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ‪ NO‬ﻭ ‪ NC‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۰‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪ M‬ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ NO‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ M‬ﻭ ‪ M a‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۶۲‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ‪ M a‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﭗ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ NC‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﭗ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ M‬ﻭ ‪ M a‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٤٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﭗ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ) ‪ ( M a‬ﺳﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺁﻧﺴﺖ‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ OL‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ‪ M‬ﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۱‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۲‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﮐﻪ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۶۳‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﭗ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻣﺪﺍﺭﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻣﻲ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٤٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﻪ ﺁﺏ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺾ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۳‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪-۸-۴‬‬

‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۴‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮕﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۱‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٤٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﻳﮏ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺳﺒﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﻲ ﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ )ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ‪(۹۵-۹۸‬ﻭﻻﻣﭗ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻭﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﻕ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ h‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۶۲‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۲‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۶۳‬ﻳﮏ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ‪ M‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﻮﺯﺩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۶۴‬ﻳﮏ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺳﺒﺰﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ‪ NO‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﺎ ‪ M b‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ M‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ M b‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۶۵‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٤٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۳‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۴‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۵‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٤٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪-۹-۴‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﺩﺭﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﮑﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﺷﻮﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ‪ ،‬ﺁﺏ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﺸﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۶۶‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۶۷‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻳﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۶‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٥٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۷‬‬

‫ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -۳‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬

‫‪ -۴‬ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٥١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٥٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻞ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ -۵‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫‪ -۶‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ‬
‫‪ -۱-۵‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۸‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺗﺮﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ NEC‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۸‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٥٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۵‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﻭ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﺨﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۶۹‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺭﺥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ‪،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۶۹‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻫﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻭﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 240‬ﻭﻟﺖ‪ 24‬ﺍﻫﻤﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ۱۰ A‬ﻣﻲ ﮐﺸﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪240‬‬
‫=‪I‬‬ ‫=‪, I‬‬ ‫‪= 10 A‬‬
‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ‪ 24‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺭﺥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ 10000A‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪240‬‬
‫=‪I‬‬ ‫‪= 10000 A‬‬
‫‪0.24‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﮎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺯﺭﻟﻪ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﮐﺎﺭﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﭘﻲ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺭﺥ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺭﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﻲ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﭗ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٥٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ )ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‪-‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻭﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۷۰‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۷۰‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۵‬ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪﻭﻳﺎﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ 10‬ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪۲۰‬ﺗﺎ‪۳۰‬ﺁﻣﭙﺮﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۷۱‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﺍﮐﻢ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﺍﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺗﺮ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٥٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۷۱‬‬

‫‪ -۴-۵‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﺸﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﮐﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪۶‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ‪۶‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ‪۸‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺷﮑﻞ‪( ۷۲‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۷۲‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٥٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۵-۵‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﻭﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ‪،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻭﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪) .‬ﺷﮑﻞ‪( ۷۳‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۷۳‬‬

‫‪ -۶-۵‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٥٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ -۷-۵‬ﮐﻼﺱ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﻼﺱ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻼﺱ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪﮐﻪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﻼﺳﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﮐﻼﺳﻬﺎﻱ ‪ ۲۰ ،۱۰‬ﻭ‪ ۳۰‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪۱۰‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪۱۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﮐﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺷﮑﻞ‪(۷۴‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۷۴‬‬

‫‪ -۸-۵‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۷۵‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﺭﻓﻊ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪1- Trip Class‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٥٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۷۵‬‬

‫‪ -۹-۵‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺳﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭﺳﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ )ﺩﻭ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻫﻴﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪) .‬ﺷﮑﻞ‪( ۷۶‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۷۶‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٥٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺮﻣﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻫﻴﺘﺮﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۷۷‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﻢ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ‪۹۵‬ﻭ‪ ۹۶‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ‬
‫)‪ (۷۸‬ﺩﺭﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﭗ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﭗ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ‪۹۷‬ﻭ‪ ۹۸‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺁﮊﻳﺮﻱ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۷۷‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﮐﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺍﺯﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻭﻗﻄﻊ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻳﮑﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺯ (‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‪۳۰‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‪،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺭﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰﻳﺎ ﺁﺑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۷۸‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺷﺪ ﻭﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻭﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻳﺪ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﮑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٦٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۷۸‬‬

‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪-۱۰-۵‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﻤﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺁﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﻧﺎ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺑﺎﺭﻳﮑﻪ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﺯﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﮑﻪ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺰﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۷۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯﺁﻧﺠﺎﮐﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﻴﻤﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻤﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ )ﺷﮑﻞ‪(۷۹‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٦١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۷۹‬‬

‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﻤﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪۴۸‬‬ ‫‪-۱۱-۵‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﮏ ﭘﻞ ﻭﺳﻪ ﭘﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﻟﻴﺎﮊ ﺫﻭﺑﻲ‪ ١‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﮐﻦ‪ ٢‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ‪ ± 15%‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻼﺳﻬﺎﻱ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ‪NO‬ﻳﺎ ‪NC‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﭘﺸﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ﺷﮑﻞ‪(۸۰‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۸۰‬‬

‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪SIRIUS 3RU11‬‬ ‫‪-۱۲-۵‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﮐﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﮐﻼﺱ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺁﻥ‪۱۰‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺭﻟﻪ ‪ SIRIUS 3RU11‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ‬

‫‪1-Melting alloy Overload‬‬

‫‪2-Self resetting Opration‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٦٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۸۱‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ‪ NO‬ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ‪ NC‬ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۸۱‬‬

‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ‬ ‫‪-۱۳-۵‬‬

‫ﻳﮑﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺫﮐﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻴﺘﺮ ﺁﻧﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﻴﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۱۳-۵‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪FURNAS ESP 100‬‬

‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ‪ ESP 100‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ۶‬ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻫﻴﺘﺮﺭﺍ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻼ ﺭﻟﻪ ‪ESP 100‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ‪ FLA‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۸۲‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۸۲‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۹‬ﺗﺎ ‪۱۸‬ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﮐﻼﺳﻬﺎﻱ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫‪ ،۲۰،۱۰‬ﻭ‪ NEMA ۳۰‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٦٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۸۲‬‬

‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪Siemens 3RB10‬‬ ‫‪-۲-۱۳-۵‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ ESP 100‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻭ ‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻴﻨﮓ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۸۳‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ‪ ،NC‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ NO‬ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۸۳‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪Siemens 3RB12‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻴﺘﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ‬
‫‪-۳-۱۳-۵‬‬

‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‪) LED‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٦٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ (‪ ،‬ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ﮐﻼﺳﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ) ‪،۱۵ ،۱۰ ،۵‬‬
‫‪ ۲۰،۲۵‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ (۳۰‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ ‪ 3RB12‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ‪ Self Monitoring‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ‪ NO‬ﻭ ‪ ۲‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ‪ NC‬ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۸۴‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ‪ProFI Bus DP‬‬ ‫‪-۱۴-۵‬‬

‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ProFI Bus DP‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ Simocode- DP‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۸۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ‪ PLC‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺱ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺸﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۸۵‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٦٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪3UF5 SiMOCODE – DP‬‬ ‫‪-۱۵-۵‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ ، ProFI Bus DP‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻓﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Win-SiMOCODE – DP‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ‪ PLC‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭﺳﺴﻮﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ‪ ProFI Bus DP‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ 3UF50‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﮐﻼﺱ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺩﺭ ‪ ۶‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪ ۵‬ﺗﺎ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪ ۳۰‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۸۶‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ ۸‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ‪ ۴‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۸۶‬‬

‫ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۳‬ﮐﻼﺱ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -۴‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬

‫‪ -۵‬ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫‪ -۶‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ‪ ProFI Bus DP‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٦٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺸﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٦٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺸﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫‪-۱-۶‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۸۷‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۸۷‬‬

‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﮐﺎﺭﻣﻴﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﻲ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۸۸‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﺮﺑﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ‪ DC‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﻲ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺁﻫﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٦٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۸۸‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺮﮐﻠﻴﺪﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻼﺗﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭﮐﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻼﺗﻴﻦ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ )ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ(ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻢ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﺯﮐﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۸۹‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻳﺎﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﻢ‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻫﻨﺮﺑﺎﻱ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۸۸‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺁﻫﻨﺮﺑﺎﻱ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪،‬ﺁﺭﻣﻴﭽﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺁﻫﻨﺮﺑﺎ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭ ﻣﮕﻨﺖ ﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﺴﻲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۸۹‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٦٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۸۹‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۹۰‬ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺁﻫﻨﺮﺑﺎﻱ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ SW1‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ SW1‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﮕﻨﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ M‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ SW1‬ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪M‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٧٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻦ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹۰‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۶‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻭﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻭﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻭﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٧١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺮﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺮﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﺋﺰﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪۶۳‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﭙﺮﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﻔﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻫﻤﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪۸۰‬ﺁﻣﭙﺮ (‬

‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ‬

‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺯ ‪۱۲‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ‪۵۰۰‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﺴﻮﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻳﮑﺴﻮ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﮔﺮﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﮐﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺭ‬

‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ‪ − 20o C‬ﺗﺎ ‪ + 60o C‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻩ ‪ -‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮑﻲ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﻐﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﮐﻢ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻳﻔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯ‪ -‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻫﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﭙﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪۲۰‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺡ‪ -‬ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﻓﺮﺳﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪۲‬ﺗﺎ ‪۴‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻨ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻭﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁ ‪ -‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪VDE − DIN‬‬ ‫‪-۱‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪-۲‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻮﻱ ‪UTE − NF‬‬
‫‪-۳‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ‪B.S‬‬
‫‪-۴‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍﻳﻲ ‪GSA‬‬
‫‪-۵‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻤﻴﺴﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﺗﮑﻨﻴﮏ ‪IEC‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۶‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬

‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﺭﺍﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺍﺯﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻴﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﮑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۹۱‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٧٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹۱‬‬

‫‪ -۴-۶‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﺰﺍﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹۲‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹۲‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٧٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۵-۶‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹۳‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﻴﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ OL‬ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﻭﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ‪ NO‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪ M‬ﻭ ‪ L2‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ‪ (Ma) M‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Start‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹۳‬‬

‫‪ -۶-۶‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬

‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ‪ ١NEMA‬ﻭ‪ ٢IEC‬ﺍﺯﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ NEMA .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ‪ IEC‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1- National Electrical Manufacturer Association‬‬

‫‪2-International Electrotechnical Commission‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٧٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۶-۶‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪NEMA‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ‪ NEMA‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ‪ ICS2‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺐ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ‪ NEMA‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ NEMA‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ‪ 00‬ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ‪ 9‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(۴‬‬

‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ‪ NEMA‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺯﻣﺨﺖ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﻲ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﺍﺯﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪ IEC‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ NEMA‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ -‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ ‪ Jogging‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ‪NEMA‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺐ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﮐﻔﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ ﻭ ‪ Jogging‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ‪ NEMA‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (۵‬ﺳﺎﻳﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(۵‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٧٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۶-۶‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪IEC‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﭘﺮﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻓﻀﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺳﻴﮑﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ IEC‬ﮐﺎﺭﺍ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻘﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪ IEC‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺎﮐﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﺩﺭ‪ IEC 158-1‬ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ IEC.‬ﺳﺎﻳﺰ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (۶‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ AC-3‬ﻭ‪ AC-4‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(۶‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ‪IEC‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻔﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻠﻔﻲ ﮐﻢ‬ ‫‪AC1‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪AC2‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﺳﻨﺠﺎﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪AC3‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻔﺲ ﺳﻨﺠﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻱ‪ -‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪AC4‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫‪AC11‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (۶‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‪ ۴‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ AC4 ، AC3 ، AC2 ، AC1‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ AC11‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ(ﻧﻮﻉ‪AC1‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ 0.95‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ(ﻧﻮﻉ ‪AC2‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ )ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺭﺋﻮﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ (ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺿﺪ ﻣﺤﺮﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٧٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﭖ( ﻧﻮﻉ ‪AC3‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﻔﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪۵‬ﺗﺎ‪۷‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺕ(ﻧﻮﻉ‪AC4‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﻔﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ‪۵‬ﺗﺎ‪۷‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ (ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۷-۶‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‪ ١‬ﻳﺎ ‪DP‬‬

‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DP‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻔﻲ )ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻲ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻗﻄﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﮑﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DP‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ )‪ (FLA‬ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ) ‪ (LRA‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ FLA‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮐﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ LRA‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﮐﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮐﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DP‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ‬
‫• ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﺸﺎﻭﺭﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺁﺑﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬

‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫• ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭼﺸﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪1-Definite Purpose Contactor‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٧٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺷﮑﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﻲ‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻠﻒ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬

‫‪ -۸-۶‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪FURNAS INNOVA PLUS‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ‪ NEMA0‬ﺗﺎ‪ 4‬ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ 100HP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻤﺘﺎﻝ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﮐﻼﺳﻬﺎﻱ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻭ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۹۴‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹۴‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ESP100‬‬ ‫‪-۹-۶‬‬

‫‪INNOVA PLUS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﺯﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻭ ﮐﻼﺳﻬﺎﻱ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻭ ‪۲۰‬ﻭ‪ ۳۰‬ﻣﻲ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ESP100‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ‪ FLA‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ ، A‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 135A‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﻲ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 10A‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻧﺞ ‪ 4:1 FLA‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ 10A‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٧٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﺍﺯ‪10A‬ﺭﻧﺞ ‪ FLA‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﺑﺎ ‪4:1‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ESP100‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ ۹‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۱۸‬ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ ‪ ، ESP100‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹۵‬‬

‫‪ -۱۰-۶‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪SiRIUS 3R‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﺞ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎ ‪95A‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺰﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ ‪ S00(12A) :‬ﻭ )‪ S0(25A‬ﻭ )‪S2(50A‬‬
‫ﻭ )‪.S3(95A‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۹۶‬ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺁﻧﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ S3‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ 75HP‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ 70mm‬ﭘﻬﻨﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺁﻧﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺗﺎ ‪ (60 o C )140 o F‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﻞ ﺟﺎ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٨٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ،S00‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻤﭙﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ S0‬ﻭ ‪ S2‬ﻭ ‪ S3‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﻤﭙﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۹۷‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹۷‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٨١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ SiRIUS 3R‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ DC‬ﻭ ‪ AC‬ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻳﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۹۸‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹۸‬‬

‫‪ -۱۱-۶‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪3TF‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ 3TF‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ‪ 100‬ﺗﺎ ‪500HP‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ‪ 460VAC‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻧﺞ ‪ ۲۴‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﺎ ‪ 600VAC‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﮐﻼﺱ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻫﻴﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺷﮑﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۹۹‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﺞ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﻳﭗ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٨٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۹۹‬‬

‫‪ -۱۲-۶‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (۷‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(۷‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٨٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺸﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺫﮐﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۳‬ﻧﺮﻣﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۴‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -۵‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ AC4‬ﻭ ‪ AC1‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬

‫‪ -۶‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DP‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٨٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٨٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ‬
‫‪ -۵‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪-۱-۷‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۰۰‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻭ ﺁﻻﺭﻣﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۰۱‬ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ‪ NO‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﺁﺭﻣﻴﭽﺮﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺁﻫﻨﺮﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻨﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﺸﺶ ﻓﻨﺮ‪،‬ﺁﺭﻣﻴﭽﺮﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻫﻨﺮﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٨٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۰۱‬‬

‫ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪-۲-۷‬‬

‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ NC ،NO‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺮﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻣﺠﺰﺍﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﮎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﭘﻞ‬
‫ﭘﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﺰﻭﻟﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۰۲‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﮏ ﭘﻞ‪،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٨٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۰۲‬‬

‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻗﻄﺐ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻳﺎ ‪ Throw‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ﺷﮑﻞ‪(۱۰۳‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۰۳‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ : SPST‬ﺗﮏ ﭘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﮏ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ : SPDT‬ﺗﮏ ﭘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ : DPST‬ﺩﻭ ﭘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﮏ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ : DPDT‬ﺩﻭ ﭘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ‬

‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮﮐﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺮﻳﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۰۴‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۰۵‬ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪1- Throw‬‬
‫‪2- Break‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٨٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۰۴‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۰۵‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪-۳-۷‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۰۶‬ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ‪ 24VAC‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪ M‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۰۶‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ 460VAC‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺭﻟﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ )‪ (CR‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ 24VAC‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۰۷‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ‪ ۲‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪،‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﮐﻨﺘـﺮﻝ )‪(CR‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ‪ CR‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ‪ ۲‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭ ﻣـﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ‪ M‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ‪ ۱‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﮐﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺎ ﺑـﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﺷـﺪﻥ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ M‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑـﺎ ﻓـﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﻟﻪ ‪ CR‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ‪ M‬ﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۰۸‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٨٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۰۶‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۰۷‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٩٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۰۸‬‬

‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ‬ ‫‪-۴-۷‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۴-۷‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪SiRIUS 3RH11‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻤﭙﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۰۹‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 3HR11‬ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ PLC‬ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤ ﹰﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ‪ DC‬ﻭ ‪ AC‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 12VDC‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 230VDC‬ﻭ ‪ 24VAC‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 600VAC‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۰۹‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٩١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۴-۷‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪Plug in‬‬

‫ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺳﻮﮐﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻓﻠﻨﺠﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۱۰‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪ 120VAC ،24VAC‬ﻳﺎ‪24VDC‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ Plug in‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۱۰‬‬
‫‪ -۳-۴-۷‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ SiRIUS 3RP‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ SiRIUS 3RP1‬ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۱۱‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻧﺞ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ 0.05‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ SiRIUS 3RP15‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻧﺞ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ 0.05‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 100‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﮑﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۱۲‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﺸﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻠﺸﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٩٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۱۱‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻨﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ -‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۱۳‬ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ‪ NO‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ‪ NOTC‬ﻳﺎ ‪ NO‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪-۱-۳-۴-۷‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ TR1‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪S1‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٩٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۱۴‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ TR1 ،‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ‪TR1 ،‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ NO‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ TR1‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻨﺪﺩ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ‪ PL1‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ S1‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ TR1‬ﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ TR1‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪ PL1‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۱۳‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۱۴‬‬

‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ – ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪-۲-۳-۴-۷‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۱۵‬ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ‪ NC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ NCTO‬ﺗﺎ ‪ NC‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﻴﮑﻪ ‪ S1‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ‪ PL1‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ TR1‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ S1‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ TR1‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۱۶‬ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪NC‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ TR1‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪ PL1‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﮑﻪ ‪ S1‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ TR1‬ﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ TR1‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ‪ PL1‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٩٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۱۵‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۱۶‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۳-۴-۷‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۱۷‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺯﻳﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ‪ NO‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‪ NOTO‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ‪ NO‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪TR1‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ‪ ، S1‬ﺭﻟﻪ ‪ TR1‬ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ NO‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ TR1‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪ PL1‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ S1‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ TR1‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ‪TR1‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ NO‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ‪ PL1‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۱۷‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٩٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۴-۳-۴-۷‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ -‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۱۸‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ‪ NC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ‪ NCTC‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ TR1‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ‪ PL1‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ‪ S1‬ﺭﻟﻪ ‪ TR1‬ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ‪ PL1‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ S1‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ TR1‬ﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪NO‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪ PL1‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۱۸‬‬

‫‪ -۵-۳-۴-۷‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ‪ NO‬ﻳﺎ‪ NC‬ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ S1‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ TR1‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪ PL1‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ TR1‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪ PL2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۱۹‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٩٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﭘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ ﻳﺎ ‪ Plug in‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -۳‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﭼﻪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -۴‬ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٩٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٩٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ‪،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‪،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‪،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺗﮑﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ‬

‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ‬ ‫‪-۱-۸‬‬

‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮐﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﻳﮋﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫•‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺗﻮ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ )ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪٩٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪-۲-۸‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۲-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬

‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﮐﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﭼﺎﻗﻮﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ‪۶‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ‪۳‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ R,S,T‬ﻭ‪۳‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ‪ U,V,W‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ )‪ (O‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ)‪ (I‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻠﻬﺎﻱ)‪ (۱۲۰‬ﺗﺎ )‪ (۱۲۲‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ : (۱۲۰‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٠٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ : (۱۲۱‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ : (۱۲۲‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻫﺮﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٠١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۲-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ )ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪۴‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪۳۸۰‬ﻭﻟﺘﻲ (ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺘ ﹰﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪۴‬ﺗﺎ ‪۶‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ‪-‬ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ )ﺩﺳﺘﻲ (ﻭﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﮐﺐ )ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ (ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ‪-‬ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ ﻭﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‪۹ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ‪ R,S,T‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪U,W,V‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﮐﻼﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ‪ X,Y,Z‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻼﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﮐﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ ∆ / Y‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻨ ﹰﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫∆ ﻳﺎ ‪380 / 660V‬‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻼﮐﺶ ‪380V‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2.2‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺎ ‪۴‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤ ﹰﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪۴‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺎ ‪۱۱‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪ ۳۸۰‬ﻭﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ (ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻠﻬﺎﻱ )‪ (۱۲۳‬ﺗﺎ )‪ (۱۲۵‬ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٠٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ : (۱۲۳‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻫﺮﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ : (۱۲۴‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٠٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ : (۱۲۵‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٠٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۲-۸‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﻩ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺪﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭼﭗ ﮔﺮﺩ‪-‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﮔﺮﻓﺎﺯ )‪ (R‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﻮﺩ)‪R‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪U‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ )‪(S‬ﻭ)‪ (T‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۲۶‬ﻋﻮﺽ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﭗ ﮔﺮﺩ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﻭﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ ﻭﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﭼﭗ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﭗ ﮔﺮﺩ‪-‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ ۶‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺣﺮﻭﻑ ‪ T,S,R‬ﻭ‪ W,V,U‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻭﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﭼﭗ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻠﻬﺎﻱ)‪ (۱۲۶‬ﺗﺎ)‪ (۱۲۸‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ :(۱۲۷‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻫﺮﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪: (۱۲۶‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٠٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ :(۱۲۸‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ‬

‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪-۳-۸‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۳-۸‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ AC‬ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﺳﻨﺠﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺭﺩﻭ‪،‬ﺳﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻪ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪ AC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ‪ AC‬ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻄﺒﻬﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪120 f‬‬
‫= ‪ns‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺁﻥ ‪ n s‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺳﻨﮑﺮﻭﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻗﻄﺒﻲ ﺩﺭﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‪ ۶۰‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺳﻨﮑﺮﻭﻥ ‪1800‬‬
‫‪ rpm‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺳﻨﮑﺮﻭﻥ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ‪ 60HZ‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٠٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻄﺒﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺰﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻧﻴﺰﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻪ‬
‫• ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻪ )ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ (‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﻭﻧﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﮐﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺑﺎﮐﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻠﻪ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﻭﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ‬ ‫‪-۱-۱-۳-۸‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﭙﭻ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻄﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻄﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻭﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺷﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪1- Selective Control‬‬

‫‪2- Compelling Control‬‬
‫‪3- Progressive Control‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٠٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۲۹‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۲۹‬‬

‫ﺗﺨﺘﻪ ﮐﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‪۱۲‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ( x a , y a , z a ) .‬ﻭ‬
‫) ‪ (U a ,Va ,Wa‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻗﻄﺐ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﮐﻨﺪﻭ ) ‪ ( xb , y b , z b‬ﻭ ) ‪ (U b ,Vb ,Wb‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻄﺐ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪۶‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﻪ ﮐﻠﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﮑﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﮐﻮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺁﺑﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻟﺒﺎﺳﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺁﺳﺎﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﻭﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ‬
‫ﻭﭘﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۳۰‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻨﺪ ‪۴‬ﻗﻄﺒﻲ )ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪۱۴۲‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ (ﻭﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪۱۲‬ﻗﻄﺒﻲ )ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪۴۷۵‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ( ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﮐﻪ ﺫﮐﺮﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﮐﻪ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺮﺩﻭﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۳۱‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٠٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۳۰‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٠٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۳۱‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١١٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﺐ‬ ‫‪-۲-۱-۳-۸‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﭙﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۳۲‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﻄﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۳۲‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ ۳۰۰۰/۱۵۰۰‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ . ۱۵۰۰/۷۵۰‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺳﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺩﻭ ﮐﻼﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ‪،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭﺻﺤﺒﺘﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۳۳‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻼﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﺯﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ )ﺍﻟﻒ(ﺩﻭﮐﻼﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ‪۴‬ﻗﻄﺐ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫)ﺏ( ﺩﻭ ﮐﻼﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻼﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ ۶‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪۹‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﮐﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫) ‪ ( x,U b ,U a‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ) ‪ ( y,Vb ,Va‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ) ‪ ( z,Wb ,Wa‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ) ‪ (Wb ,Vb ,U b‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ "ﮐﻤﺮ" ﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١١١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۳۳‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪AC‬‬ ‫‪-۳-۱-۳-۸‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ T1‬ﻭ ‪ T3‬ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۳۵‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ F‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‪ F‬ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ R‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪ R‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۳۴‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١١٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ‪ F‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۳۵‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬

‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ R‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۳۶‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻻﮐﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻻﮐﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﮐﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‪ F‬ﻭ‪ R‬ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ‪ F‬ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‪ R‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‪ F‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪،‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‪ R‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﮑﺲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۳۵‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۳۶‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١١٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﮑﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪-۴-۱-۳-۸‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﮑﻔﺎﺯ )ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ( ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺩﻭ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﭘﻨﮑﻪ‪،‬ﮐﻮﻟﺮﻭ ﻳﺨﭽﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﮐﻨﺪ‪،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۳۷‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﮑﻔﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﭼﭙﮕﺮﺩ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﮐﻤﮑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ‪،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺳﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۳۸‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻟﺒﺎﺳﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۳۷‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١١٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۳۸‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ AC‬ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪-۴-۸‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۴-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ‪،‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۳۹‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۴۰‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪﮐﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻔﺲ ﺳﻨﺠﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۶‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺪﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۳۹‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١١٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۴۰‬‬

‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ‪ NEMA B‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪175%‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ‪ 200%‬ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻐﺰﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۴۱‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۴۱‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١١٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۴-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺁﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﺠﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﮐﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۲-۴-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺗﻮ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺷﺪ‪،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻭﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻫﺮﺩﻭﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﮐﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺮﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﮑﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯﮐﺎﺭﺍﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۴۲‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ‪ 65% ،50%‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 80%‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﻤﭙﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺩﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١١٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۴۲‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۲-۴-۸‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۴۳‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ ۶۵‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۸۰‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﮐﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺷﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ‪ 50%‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﻢ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻭﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﭘﻤﭙﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻳﺰﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۴۳‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١١٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۲-۴-۸‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭﺳﺮﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﺩﺭﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۴۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺩﺭﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﮐﺰﻱ ﻭ ﮐﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۴۴‬‬

‫‪ -۴-۲-۴-۸‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯﻋﺒﻮﺭﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺩﺭﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۴۵‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺩﺭﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻓﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 70%‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 80%‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﮐﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﮐﺸﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١١٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺋﻮﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۴۵‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۴۵‬‬

‫‪ -۵-۲-۴-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻮﺭﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ (ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺋﻮﺳﺘﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۴۶‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ )ﺭﺋﻮﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ( ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٢٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۴۶‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﻳﻨﮕﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﺭﺋﻮﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۴۷‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺋﻮﺳﺘﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۴۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﻳﻨﮕﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺩﺭﺳﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٢١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۴۷‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۴۸‬‬

‫‪ -۶-۲-۴-۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻳﮑﻪ ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭ ) ‪ (Wb ,Vb ,U b‬ﮐﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺶ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺣﺎﻝ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪﺷﮑﻞ)‪-۱۴۹‬ﺍﻟﻒ(ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﺮﻫﺎ ) ‪ (Wb ,Vb ,U b‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭﺳﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ) ‪(Wa ,Va ,U a‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ )ﻗﻄﺐ ﮐﻢ ( ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ -۱۴۹‬ﺏ( ﺑﻪ ﺭﺋﻮﺱ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻢ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٢٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ‪۳۸۰‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺧﻂ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ )ﻫﺮ ﻧﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪۱۹۰‬ﻭﻟﺖ(‬
‫ﻭﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪۲۲۰‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‪۴۴۰‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭﻋﻤ ﹰ‬

‫ﺏ‪:‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﻗﻄﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ :‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻨﺪ )ﻗﻄﺐ ﮐﻢ(‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۴۹‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ∆, YY‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻭﺑﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﻨﺪﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ‪ ۱۵‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﻭﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻨ ﹰﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Y , YY‬ﻳﺎ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ‪-‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻭﺑﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۵۰‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪ C1‬ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‪،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ C 2‬ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪ C3‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪ C1‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ( ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ C 2‬ﻭ ‪ C 3‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻭﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺿﻤﻨﺎﹰﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪C1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ C 2‬ﻭ ‪ C3‬ﻫﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٢٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۵۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺑﻞ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٢٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۵۱‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭﺭﺍﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﻨﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﮐﻨﺪ)ﺩﺳﺘﻲ(‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺍﻭﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۵۱‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٢٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۵۲‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۵۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ‪:‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ‪۴‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۵۳‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ‪ ۳۰۰۰ ،۱۵۰۰ ،۱۰۰۰‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۵۴‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪۴‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۵۳‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٢٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۵۴‬‬

‫‪ -۷-۲-۴-۸‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ‬

‫ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ AC‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ‪،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺭﺍﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۵۵‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﺠﻮﻣﻲ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﺩﻣﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٢٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۵۵‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ‬ ‫‪-۵-۸‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪SiRIUS 3R‬‬ ‫‪-۱-۵-۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﮑﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ‪،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ DIN rail‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ‪ SiRIUS 3R‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۵۶‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪ 75 HP‬ﻭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ‪ 575V‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۵۶‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٢٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪SIKO START‬‬ ‫‪-۲-۵-۸‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ SiRIUS 3R‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ‪ ۱۰۰۰‬ﺍﺳﺐ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۵۷‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۵۸‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ‪SIKO START‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۵۹‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ‪ AC‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ‪ 57%‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ‬
‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۵۷‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۵۸‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٢٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۵۹‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﮑﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪-۶-۸‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﮑﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﺭﻟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۶۰‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﮑﻔﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﻱ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۶۱‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪-۱۶۱‬ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻤﮑﻲ ‪ R1‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ -۱۶۱‬ﺏ( ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻭﺑﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪ C1‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪ C 2‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ d1‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪ C1‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭼﭙﮕﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﮕﺮﺩ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۶۰‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٣١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ‬

‫ﺏ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۶۱‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ‬ ‫‪-۷-۸‬‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﻨﮑﻪ‪،‬ﮐﻮﻟﺮﻭ ﺳﻨﮓ ﺳﻤﺒﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٣٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺑﺎﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﺗﻮﺭﺑﺎﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪،‬ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺑﺎﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﮑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ‬ ‫‪-۱-۷-۸‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻟﻨﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۶۲‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ ﻟﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻭ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۶۳‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﮕﻨﺖ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ‬

‫ﻟﻨﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺖ ﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ‬

‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۶۲‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٣٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۶۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ‬ ‫‪-۲-۷-۸‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ )‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۱/۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۶۴‬ﺷﻤﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻫﺮﻣﻲ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﭼﭗ ﮔﺮﺩ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﭼﭗ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٣٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۶۴‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۶۵‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪r1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ‪،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۶۵‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٣٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۶۶‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﺩﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۶۷‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﭼﭗ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۶۷‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۶۶‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﮑﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪-۳-۷-۸‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻳﮑﻨﻮﺍﺧﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۶۸‬ﺷﻤﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ AC‬ﻭ ‪ DC‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٣٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻱ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﭘﺲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﺋﻴﮑﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﻥ ﭼﺮﺥ ﻃﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺥ ﻃﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﻴﻮﺗﻴﻦ ﻭ ﭘﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪۱/۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﺗﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪۶‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪۱/۵‬ﺗﺎ ‪۲‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﻫﻤﻲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻳﻬﺎﻱ ‪۲۴‬ﺗﺎ ‪۴۸‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۶۸‬‬

‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﮑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۶۹‬ﺷﻤﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﮑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ )ﺩﺳﺘﻲ (ﻭﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٣٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۶۹‬‬

‫ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -۳‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬

‫‪ -۴‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬

‫‪ -۵‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬

‫‪ -۶‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬

‫‪ -۷‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -۸‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺭﺗﻮﺭﺩﺭﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -۹‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٣٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻧﻬﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ‬
‫!‪LOGO‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٣٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻧﻬﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ ‪ LOGO‬ﻭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺁﻥ‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ‪LOGO‬‬ ‫‪-۱-۹‬‬

‫‪ LOGO‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۷۰‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۷۰‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪(۱۷۱‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪ Hard-wired‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻣﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻴﺐ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺰﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺸﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٤٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ‪ LOGO‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺸﻲ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ LOGO‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪ LOGO‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۷۱‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪LOGO‬‬ ‫‪-۲-۹‬‬

‫‪ LOGO‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ LOGO‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﮎ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۷۲‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۷۲‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٤١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬ ‫‪-۳-۹‬‬

‫‪ LOGO‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ‪،24VDC ،12VDC‬‬
‫‪ 24VAC‬ﻭﻳﺎ‪115/230VAC‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﮐﺰﻳﻤﻢ ‪ 10A‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪(24/24L‬‬
‫• ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ‪) ١‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪(24/24L‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻧﮑﺸﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ‬
‫• ‪ EEPROM‬ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺖ ﭘﻮﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺁﭘﺸﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬
‫• ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ ﺯﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻧﮑﺸﻨﻬﺎﻱ ‪AND,OR,NOT,NAND,NOR,XOR‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻧﮑﺸﻨﻬﺎﻱ ‪ AND, NAND‬ﺑﺎ ﺁﺷﮑﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺯ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ‪ ON‬ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ‪ ،Latching ON‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ‪ ،OFF‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ‪ ،‬ﺭﻟﻪ ‪،Latching‬‬
‫ﮊﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ) ‪ ۲۱‬ﻓﺎﻧﮑﺸﻦ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ(‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ‪ LOGO‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬

‫• ﺷﺶ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪AC‬‬
‫• ﻫﺸﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪ DC‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮﮒ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪Pure‬‬

‫• ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ‪ LOGO‬ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪1-Integrated clock‬‬

‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٤٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪L‬‬

‫• ﺩﻭﺍﺯﺩﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬

‫• ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪AS-i‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﮐﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﺁﭘﺸﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ LOGO‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫• ‪ ۱۶‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫• ‪ ۲۴‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫• ‪۸‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫• ‪ ۳‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫• ‪ ۴۲‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﭙﺎﻟﺲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫• ‪ ۴۲‬ﺭﻟﻪ ‪Latching‬‬
‫• ‪ ۴‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻣﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫• ‪ ۵۶‬ﺑﻠﻮﮎ ﻓﺎﻧﮑﺸﻦ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٤٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫‪POWEREN.IR‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٤٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻫﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮﺯﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻪ ﻗﻠﺐ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻐﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻮﺯﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ )ﺩﺭﻳﻞ(‬ ‫‪-۱-۱۰‬‬

‫ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﻭ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﮑﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۱-۱۰‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۷۳‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻓﺮﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻭﺩ ﮔﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۷۳‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٤٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ )ﭘﻨﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮐﺎﺭﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺯﻧﻮﻉ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﻮﺭﺳﺎﻝ )ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﮐﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﺭﻣﻴﭽﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺁﺭﻣﻴﭽﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ‪،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۷۴‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۷۴‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۱-۱۰‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰﻱ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۷۵‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﮑﻔﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٤٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۷۵‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۱-۱۰‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫ﻣﻴﺰﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۷۶‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﮑﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭼﺮﺧﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۷۶‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٤٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪ -۴-۱-۱۰‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺯﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۷۷‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﮐﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۷۷‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﻮﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﮑﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۷۸‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻪ ﺩﺍﻻﻧﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻏﻠﻄﮑﻲ ﻭ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۷۹‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ‬
‫)‪ (۱۸۰‬ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﻳﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺁﺏ ﺻﺎﺑﻮﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٤٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۷۸‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۷۹‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٤٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۸۰‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٥٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ‬ ‫‪-۲-۱۰‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۸۱‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﻏﮏ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۸۱‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۲-۱۰‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﭼﭗ ﮔﺮﺩ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۸۲‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻴﻐﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪-۳-۱۰‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٥١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۸۲‬‬
‫‪ -۱-۳-۱۰‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻠﻬﺎﻱ )‪ (۱۸۳‬ﻭ)‪ (۱۸۴‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‪،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﮏ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ‪ b3‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ‪ U1‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻫﺮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭﻋﻘﺐ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ M2‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۸۳‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٥٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۸۴‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺯ‬ ‫‪-۴-۱۰‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ)ﺗﻴﻐﻪ( ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪ (۱۸۵‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺯ‪،‬ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٥٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۸۵‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫• ﺷﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﺮﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﻃﺎﻗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻱ ﺳﺮ ﻓﺮﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ)ﺩﺭﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪۱۸‬ﺩﻭﺭ‪،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‪ ۲۰‬ﻭ ﺣﺪ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ۱۴۰۰‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﮐﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫• ﻣﻴﺰ ﮔﻮﻧﻴﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺰ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﮐﺸﻮﻱ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﮐﺎﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ‪۱۰‬ﺗﺎ ‪۱۰۰‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪۲۴‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺷﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻭﻱ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٥٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫• ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻱ ﺳﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺯﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺗﮑﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺰ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﮐﺸﻮﻱ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﮔﻮﻧﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺷﮑﻠﻬﺎﻱ )‪ (۱۸۶‬ﻭ )‪ (۱۸۷‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٥٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۸۶‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٥٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۸۷‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٥٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﭘﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪-۵-۱۰‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﭘﺮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﺑﻮﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﺴﺰﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻳﮑﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺩﻋﺎ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪۷۵‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﺍﺕ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻭﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭘﺮﺳﮑﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۸۸‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﭘﺮﺱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۸۸‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٥٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﭽﻲ )ﮔﻴﻮﺗﻴﻦ(‬ ‫‪-۶-۱۰‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﭽﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺭﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮﮊﻱ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﭽﻲ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﻗﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 0.05‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﭽﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﭘﺮﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﭽﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۶-۱۰‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﭽﻲ‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۸۹‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﭽﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻮﻳﭽﻲ ‪ B1‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﮐ ﹰ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﮑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪C1‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﮕﻨﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ)‪ (۲ -۰ -۱‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﺪﺍﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ‪ b4‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪, c2‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺪﺍﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺴﺘﻲ ‪ b6‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ‪ c3‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻨ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﭻ‪ b3‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‪ c1‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ‪c2‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ c3‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﮕﻨﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ‪ b5‬ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﮕﻨﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٥٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۸۹‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﻼﻭﻳﺰ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬ ‫‪-۷-۱۰‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﻼﻭﻳﺰ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ )‪ (۱۹۰‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ‪ b2‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‪ c1‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﮕﺮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ‪ b4‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ‪ c1‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ ‪ c2‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﭗ ﮔﺮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻼﻭﻳﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ‪ b3‬ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٦٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ‪b1‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻗﻼﻭﻳﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‪ b3‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ‪ d1‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﮑﻞ)‪(۱۹۰‬‬

‫ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻫﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ؟‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ؟‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪١٦١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‬
‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬

‫‪“Control components” Siemens STEP 2000 Course‬‬ ‫‪-۱‬‬

‫‪ " -۲‬ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ‪ ، " ۱‬ﺗﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺴﻌﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ‪۱۳۶۳ ،‬‬

‫‪PowerEn.ir‬‬